Operating instructions

ManualsBrandsPanasonic ManualsCamcordersDMCFX580

ﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﻪﭽﺑﺎﺘﮐ

ﻪﺘﻓﺮﺸﻴﭘ یﺎﻬﻴﮔﮋﻳﻭ یﺍﺮﺑ

ﯽﻟﺎﺘﻴﺠﻳﺩ ﯽﺳﺎﻜﻋ ﻦﻴﺑﺭﻭﺩ

DMC-FX580 ﻩﺭﺎﻤﺷ ﻝﺪﻣ

VQT1Z01

.ﺪﻴﻳﺎﻤﻧ ﻪﻌﻟﺎﻄﻣ

ﻼﻣﺎﮐ ﺍﺭ ﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﻪﭽﺑﺎﺘﮐ ﻦﻳﺍ ،ﻩﺩﺎﻔﺘﺳﺍ ﺯﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ

ﺎﻔﻄﻟ

Summary of content (173 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‪DMC-FX580‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪4 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪6 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء‪7 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪9 ..................................‬‬ ‫• ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪10 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪11 ...........................................‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ(‪14 .....
PAGE 3
‫• ]ﻓﻼﺵ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ[‪80 ..........................................‬‬ ‫• ]ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ[ ‪80 .......................................‬‬ ‫• ]ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی[‪81 .............................................‬‬ ‫• ]ﻏﺮﻭﺏ[ ‪81 ................................................‬‬ ‫• ]ﺳﺎﺣﻞ[ ‪81 .................................................‬‬ ‫• ]ﺑﺮﻑ[ ‪81 ..................................................‬‬ ‫• ]ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﯽ[ ‪81 .........................................‬‬ ‫• ]ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪82 ........................
PAGE 4
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮﺍﻧﺘﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(11‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(16‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 5
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]([ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫)ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ(‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫)ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ(‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AC‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪AV‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪CD-ROM‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(54‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ )ﺹ ‪(152‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ )ﺹ ‪/(61‬‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(109‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪9 10‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪/‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(148 ،51 ،9‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ )ﺹ ‪(35 ،29 ،17‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪) [MENU/SET‬ﺹ ‪(20‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪) [DISPLAY‬ﺹ ‪(51‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪) [Q.
PAGE 8
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪12 13‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪) OFF/ON‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪(20‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ )ﺹ ‪(43‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ )ﺹ ‪(129‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(133 ،109 ،83‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ )ﺹ ‪(83 ،35‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪) [E.ZOOM‬ﺹ ‪(45‬‬ ‫‪16 17‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪14 15‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪) LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻠﻤﯽ‬ ‫)ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ( ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ )ﺹ ‪ (33‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(25‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ )ﺹ ‪ (70‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ DMW-BCF10E‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻘﻠﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ‪ AC‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ‪AC‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ]‪  [CHARGE‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ]‪ [CHARGE‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 130‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ]‪ [CHARGE‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﻴﺰﻧﺪ‬ ‫• ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ‪) AC‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی( ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪[.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﻴﺰﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ (.
PAGE 15
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪] .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻫﺮ ‪ 2‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 87‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪[.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 360‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی(‪/‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫• ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺎﻧﺎﺳﻮﻧﻴﮏ ‪ Panasonic‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺎﻥ ِ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﭘﺎﻧﺎﺳﻮﻧﻴﮏ ‪ Panasonic‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ :‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ‪ ‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 17
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ( ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ )ﺳﺒﺰ( ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪) k  ð‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‪(‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫† )ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‪(‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ )ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪) SD‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 8‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ 2‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫)ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ FAT12‬ﻳﺎ ‪FAT16‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪(SD‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ 4) SDHC‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪32‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪‬‬ ‫)ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ FAT32‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪(SD‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ‪MultiMediaCard‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OFF ON‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪[MENU/SET‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ]ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ[ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(23‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [DISPLAY‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ AE‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ]ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ [AF‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [Ø‬ﺑﻪ ]‪ [š‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪AE‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪[MENU/SET‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪[MODE‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]!‪ [¦/‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[‬ ‫] [ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،[AF‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [DISPLAY‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ[ )ﺹ ‪]/(99‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﻴﺮ[ )ﺹ ‪(108‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [Q.MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Q.
PAGE 26
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ[‪] ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ[ ﻭ ]ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ[ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ[‪] ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ[‪] ،‬ﺑﻴﭗ[ ﻭ ]ﺯﺑﺎﻥ[ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] U‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ[‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] LCD‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪[LCD‬‬ ‫]‪[OFF‬‬ ‫„ ]ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪:[LCD‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫… ]ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ‪:[LCD‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫]ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ[‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺮ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(51‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ[‪:‬‬ ‫]‪[ON]/[OFF‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ]ﻃﺮﺡ[ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ]‬ ‫]ﻃﺮﺡ[‪:‬‬ ‫] [‪]/‬‬ ‫[‬ ‫[ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 29
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] q‬ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ[‬ ‫‪] p‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی[‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[10MIN.]/[5MIN.]/[2MIN.
PAGE 30
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] o‬ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ[‬ ‫]‪[OFF‬‬ ‫]‪[1SEC.‬‬ ‫]‪[2SEC.‬‬ ‫]‪:[HOLD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ZOOM‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 4‬ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪) USB‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] x‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪] y‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ[‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]‪ [PC‬ﻳﺎ ])‪ [PictBridge(PTP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ])‪:[PictBridge(PTP‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:[PC] z‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫]ﻓﺮﻣﺖ[‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ‪) AC‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی( ﻭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪) DC‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻃﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪[MODE‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]!‪ [¦/‬ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‬ ‫¦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺹ ‪(35‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫» ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪(40‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ¹‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪(63‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫¼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪(64‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ‪ñ :‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺘﺪﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ‪]/‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﻴﺮ[ ‪]/‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ[‪ /‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ AF] /‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[‪]/‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ /[.
PAGE 36
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪) ‬ﺳﺒﺰ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪  AF‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ )‪ 1/(Wide‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ (Tele‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺖ( ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪-i‬ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ[‬ ‫¦ ‪‬‬ ‫]‪-i‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ[‬ ‫]‪-i‬ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ[‬ ‫]‪-i‬ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺷﺐ[‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ]‡[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬ ‫]‪-i‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺷﺐ[‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ]‪ [Œ‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬ ‫]‪-i‬ﮐﻮﺩک[‪‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭽﻴﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ [¦] ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ]ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ[ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]‪ [ON‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪) .
PAGE 39
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‬ ‫– ]ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ[‪) ‬ﺹ ‪]/(95‬ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ[ )ﺹ ‪]/(105‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ[‪) ‬ﺹ ‪]/(107‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ[ )ﺹ ‪(86‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[‬ ‫– ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ[‪]/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ[‪]/‬ﺑﻴﭗ[‪]/‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ[‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪³ :‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪(AE‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺯﺍﺩی ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]!‪ [¦/‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪[MODE‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫]ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ [AE‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ AF‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺑﯽ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﯽ )ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﯽ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﯽ ]‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ]ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﻴﺮ[ )ﺹ ‪ ،(108‬ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ )ﺹ ‪ (61‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯽ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪²´±³ñ :‬‬ ‫¿‪n‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﯽ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ )‪/(EZ‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ )ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ( ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ )ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ ]ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ،[9.8‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (W/Y/X‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ‬ ‫[ )‪ 3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 12.1) 12M‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ( ‪ CCD‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ]‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 3) 3M‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ( ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ‪ õ‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ”‪ “EZ‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ”‪”) “Extra optical Zoom‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ“( ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻪ )‪) (Tele‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ( ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [E.ZOOM‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ[ )ﺹ ‪ (106‬ﺭﻭی ]‪ [ON‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ ،[E.ZOOM‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪() .‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [E.
PAGE 46
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫)]ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ[(‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]([ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﺑﻪ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪/‬‬ ‫]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﻭی ]([ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ )ﺹ ‪ (9‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16 8 4 21‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]‪ (T) [Z‬ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺹ ‪.(9‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ ‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪[MODE‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‬ ‫( ]ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ[ )ﺹ ‪(46‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] K‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ[ )ﺹ ‪(110‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] L‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ[ )ﺹ ‪(113‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ[ )ﺹ ‪(114‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‚[‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‚[‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫]ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﮑﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ (50‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‚[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ[ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ]ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ[ )ﺹ ‪ (119‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺠﺰ ‪ [Ü‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪] ،‬ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ]‚[ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ(‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ‪AC‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی( ﻭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪) DC‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [DISPLAY‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪[DISPLAY‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [DISPLAY‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] ‬‬ ‫[‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ 33‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] ‬‬ ‫[‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻤﺨﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [0EV‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪²´±³ñ :‬‬ ‫¿‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻮﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ]‪.[‰‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ“ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(56‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‡‪ :‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪/‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ )ﭼﺸﻢ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ) ]‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[‪] ،‬‬ ‫[ ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫[‪] ،‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪Tele‬‬ ‫‪Wide‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 60‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 6.0‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 1.0‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 2.8‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ISO80‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 60‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 1.7‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1.0‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ISO100‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 60‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 1.9‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1.0‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ISO200‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 60‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 2.7‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 1.0‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 1.2‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ISO400‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 60‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 3.8‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 1.0‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 1.
PAGE 58
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‡‬ ‫‪‰‬‬ ‫‪ 11/30‬ﺗﺎ ‪1/2000‬‬ ‫‪Œ‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺗﺎ ‪1/2000‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 1/4‬ﺗﺎ ‪21/2000‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ]ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ )ﺹ ‪ (108‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺹ ‪(97‬‬ ‫• ‪ :2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﯽ ﺭﻭی ]‪ [OFF‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪n²´±³ :‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﮐﻠﻮﺯ ﺁپ(‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻭﺍﻳﺪ ‪ (1) Wide‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﺘﻬﯽ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻳﺪ )‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ]‪ [Œ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .
PAGE 61
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪²´±³ñ :‬‬ ‫¿‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ [ë] ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪²´±³ñ :‬‬ ‫¿‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ ‫)‪ AF/AE‬ﻟﻤﺴﯽ(‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪) .‬ﺭﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮏ(‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ AF‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪) .
PAGE 63
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪± :‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ‪(AE‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺤﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻋﺪﺩ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]!‪ [¦/‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪´ :‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪(AE‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]!‪ [¦/‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪² :‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫)ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]!‪ [¦/‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪ ‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﮐﻤﮏ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﮔﺸﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺗﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﻤﮏ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪´±³ :‬‬ ‫¿‪n‬‬ ‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ [È] ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ]ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ[ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪¿ ²´±³ :‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪²´±³ :‬‬ ‫ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪/‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪-‬ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ [È] ‬ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺪﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ]ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ[‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ]‪ [DISPLAY‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ]‪ [DISPLAY‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ []/[‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺧﺮﻭﺝ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪:‬‬ ‫¿‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ(‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﺨﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ]ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ[‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ]ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ[‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ]‪ [SCN‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ[‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺩﺍﺏ ﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﮑﻨﻴﮏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘُﺮﺗﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺛﺮﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ‪ Tele‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ]ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ [š] ،[AF‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ[‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺹ ‪.(25‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ]ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ[ ﻭ ]ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ[ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺑﺮﺍی ]‪ [Y‬ﻭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺑﺮﺍی ] ‪] ،[ X‬‬ ‫–]‬ ‫[ ﺑﺮﺍی ]‪[W‬‬ ‫• ]ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ[ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ]›[ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ 1015/46‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ[‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭی ]‪ [Œ‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﮐﻤﮏ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ[‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ( ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺑﺎﺯ ﭘﺲ[ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ[‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩی ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ[ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ]‪ [ISO1600‬ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺷﺐ[‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﮑﻨﻴﮏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘُﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺷﺐ‬ ‫[ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.
PAGE 76
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﯽ[‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺮﻭﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﮑﻨﻴﮏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫[ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫[ ﻳﺎ ]‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ]‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﮐﻮﺩک‪]/[1‬ﮐﻮﺩک‪[2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺩک ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺷﺎﺩﺍﺏ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ]ﮐﻮﺩک‪ [1‬ﻭ ]ﮐﻮﺩک‪ [2‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]ﭼﺎپ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪ (125‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ‪/‬ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [SET‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ]ﺳﻦ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﻧﺎﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ[‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﮓ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]ﭼﺎپ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪ (125‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ]ﺳﻦ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﻧﺎﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ]ﮐﻮﺩک‪]/[1‬ﮐﻮﺩک‪ [2‬ﺩﺭ ﺹ ‪ 77‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻻﻣﭗ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪ ،AF‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]‪ [OFF‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻗﻄﺎﺭی ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ[‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪] 1‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ (3:2) 2.5M ،(4:3) 3M‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (16:9) 2M‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻓﻼﺵ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ[‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• ‪ (3:2) 2.5M ،(4:3) 3M‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (16:9) 2M‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی[‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﺐ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺒﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﮑﻨﻴﮏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻴﮑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭی ]‪ [Œ‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪[PIN HOLE‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ (3:2) 2.5M ،(4:3) 3M‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (16:9) 2M‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ]ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ[ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ]›[ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ 1015/46‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪n :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]!‪ [¦/‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫[ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫[ ﻳﺎ ]‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ] [‪] ،‬‬ ‫”‪ “10MB/s‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭی ]‪ [Œ‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 172‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻴﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍی ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 2‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ‪ 2‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪²´±³ñ :‬‬ ‫¿‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ[ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ]‪ [ON‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 6‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(23‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺯﻭﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻧﺎﻡ[‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ]ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ[ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺹ ‪ 123‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫]ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ[‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺯ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ“‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ]ﺣﺬﻑ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ]ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ [AF‬ﺭﻭی ]‪ [š‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪²´±³ñ :‬‬ ‫¿‪n‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﺰﻳﻤﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺸﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﺰﻳﻤﺖ ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫)ﮐﺪﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻼﺕ( ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ///‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﺰﻳﻤﺖ )ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ///‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ )ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﻣﺤﻞ[ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 7‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ]‪ [OFF‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪] ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ[ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻭی ]‪[OFF‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ )ﻭﻗﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ(‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺸﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(20‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﻣﻘﺼﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺳﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺳﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪  ،‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 95
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ[‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬﻫﺎی ﺑﺰﺭگ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪¿ ²´±³ñ :‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ]‪ [X‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ”‪ “EZ‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ”‪”) “Extra optical Zoom‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ“( ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ )ﻋﺎﻟﯽ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﮐﻢ )ﺧﺸﻦ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ[‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ[‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ (ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 99
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ[‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺑﯽ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫[‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ]‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺹ ‪.(25‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ]‪ [Ò‬ﻳﺎ ] ‪ [ SET‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [AWB‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪[AF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪¿ ²´±³ :‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ]‪[š‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ AF‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ AF‬ﺯﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ[‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪²´±³ :‬‬ ‫]‪:[C‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪[.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺎﺣﺸﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪²´±³ :‬‬ ‫]‪[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺭﻭی ]‪ [STANDARD] ،[LOW‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [HIGH‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ] [ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫– ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘُﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ[‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪n²´±³ñ :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪:[OFF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪:[B/W‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪:[SEPIA‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪:[COOL‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪:[WARM‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ]‪ [B/W‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [SEPIA‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﻴﺮ[‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﯽ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﯽ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪¿ ²´±³ :‬‬ ‫]‪[OFF‬‬ ‫]ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ[‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪:[1‬‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ[‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪¿ ²´±³ :‬‬ ‫]‪:[OFF‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪:[ON‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ]‪ [B‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪(.
PAGE 110
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫)ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ(‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ]ﺟﻠﻮﻩ[ ﻭ ]ﻣﻮﺯﻳﮏ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺟﻠﻮﻩ[‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[OFF] ،[URBAN] ،[SWING] ،[SLOW] ،[NATURAL‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [URBAN‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)]ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ[(‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]([ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻞ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ] ‪ (W) [ L‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫)]ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ[(‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]([ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ] ‪ (W) [ L‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫)]ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﯽ[(‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]([ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﻳﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ]ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﻳﯽ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫)]ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ[(‬ ‫]ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی[‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ]ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ[‪] ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ[ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺷﺐ[( ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]([ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ[‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ]ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ[ )ﺹ ‪ (119‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫]ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ[ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ(‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]([ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ]ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ[‪] ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ[‪] ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭼﺎپ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ]ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭی[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫)]ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ[(‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ]([ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] ‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ[ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﺮﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ[‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪]) .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ[(‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪]) .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺠﺰ ‪([Ü‬‬ ‫]‪ [Ü‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ[‬ ‫]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ[ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ]ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ[ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ[‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪ :‬ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪ :‬ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ )ﺹ ‪ :(9‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫• ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[‬ ‫ﮐﺠﯽ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫] [‪ [ ]/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺠﯽ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 2 ‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ[‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ )ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ( ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]ﭼﺎپ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ[ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ )ﺹ ‪) .(125‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ]ﮐﻮﺩک‪]/[1‬ﮐﻮﺩک‪ [2‬ﻭ ]ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ[ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻭ ]ﻣﺤﻞ[ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻠﻤﯽ )ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻡ ]ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﮐﻮﺩک‪]/[1‬ﮐﻮﺩک‪ [2‬ﻭ ]ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ[ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ]ﻣﺤﻞ[ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 5‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻡ ]ﮐﻮﺩک‪]/[1‬ﮐﻮﺩک‪ [2‬ﻭ ]ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ[ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪] ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ[ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻭ ]ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﭼﺎپ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ[‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪(.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﭼﺎپ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ]ﭼﺎپ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ]‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺯﻣﺨﺖ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ[‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﺎً ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺧﺮﻭﺝ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ[‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﻟﻐﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪] 2‬ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺣﺬﻑ[‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺹ ‪ 49‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ]‚[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‪/‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬ ‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ 8 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ]‪ [8m30s‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ[‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ]ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ[ ﺩﺭ ]ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ[ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺹ ‪.(120‬‬ ‫]ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ[‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 131
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭼﺎپ[‬ ‫”‪) DPOF “Digital Print Order Format‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ( ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DPOF‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭼﺎپ[‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﻟﻐﻮ[ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﻟﻐﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭی[‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭی[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(23‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ]ﺑﺮ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ؟[ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪[MENU/SET‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪(.
PAGE 134
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ[‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ]ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ[ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎک ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(23‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‚[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]ﮐﭙﯽ[‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭی ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﮐﭙﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(23‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﮐﭙﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪  .‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪  .‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ”‪ “PHOTOfunSTUDIO‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪) CD-ROM‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ( ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪) CD-ROM‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ( ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪)  USB‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ( ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎی ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]‪ ،[PC‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ(‬ ‫‪DCIM‬‬ ‫‪100_PANA‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪100_PANA‬‬ ‫‪P1000001.JPG‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪:JPG‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪:MOV‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬ ‫‪:MISC‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪P1000002.JPG‬‬ ‫‪P1000999.JPG‬‬ ‫‪101_PANA‬‬ ‫‪999_PANA‬‬ ‫‪MISC‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪)  USB‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ( ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ]‪ [å‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ]‪ [å‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ])‪ ،[PictBridge(PTP‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫)‪PictBridge(PTP‬‬ ‫‪PC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ‪ AC‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﭼﺎپ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﭼﺎپ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ[‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ”ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﮑﯽ ﻭ ﭼﺎپ ﺁﻥ“‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 3‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ”ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﭼﺎپ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ“ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ[ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ]ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ]{[ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.
PAGE 143
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ[‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫{‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[L/3.55‬‬ ‫‪ 89‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ 127‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫]‪[2L/57‬‬ ‫‪ 127‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ 178‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫]‪[POSTCARD‬‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ 148‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫]‪[16:9‬‬ ‫‪ 101.6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ 180.6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫]‪[A4‬‬ ‫‪ 210‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ 297‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫]‪[A3‬‬ ‫‪ 297‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ 420‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫]‪[1015cm‬‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ 150‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫]‪[46‬‬ ‫‪ 101.6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ 152.4‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫]‪[810‬‬ ‫‪ 203.
PAGE 144
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫]ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی[ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫{‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪á‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭼﺎﺭﭼﻮﺏ ﺭﻭی ‪ 1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪â‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﺭﭼﻮﺏ ﺭﻭی ‪ 1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪ã‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪ä‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪¸ :‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪) AV‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ(‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‪:‬‬ ‫]ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ [TV‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(31‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AV OUT/‬‬ ‫‪DIGITAL‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﻢ ‪) AV‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ(‬ ‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 146
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪SD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪) AV‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ( ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SDHC‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ ﺍی )‪DMW-HDC2‬؛ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی(‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ 1080i‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ 1080i‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪COMPONENT‬‬ ‫‪OUT‬‬ ‫‪Y/G‬‬ ‫‪PB/B‬‬ ‫‪PR/R‬‬ ‫‪AV OUT/‬‬ ‫‪DIGITAL‬‬ ‫) ‪#WFKQ .
PAGE 148
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪) [»] AE‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪5 6 7‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(54‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(41‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ )ﺹ ‪(41‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(95‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ )ﺹ ‪(96‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﺹ ‪(14‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﺹ ‪(169‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ )ﺹ ‪(18‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪1/30 100‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ )ﺹ ‪) (18‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ(‬ ‫‪13 12 11‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(98‬‬ ‫‪ AF/AE :‬ﻟﻤﺴﯽ )ﺹ
PAGE 149
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪18 19 20‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ )ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‬ ‫‪ AF/AE 17‬ﻟﻤﺴﯽ )ﺹ ‪(62‬‬ ‫‪100 COOL‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(59‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﺹ ‪(59‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪(57‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺹ‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ )ﺹ ‪(99‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(98‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(98‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ )ﺹ ‪(107‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3s‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪ 21‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﺹ ‪(84‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪ 22‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ )ﺹ
PAGE 150
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ )ﺹ ‪(46‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺹ ‪(127‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪100_0001‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ )ﺹ ‪(119‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1/6‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ )ﺹ ‪(125‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9s‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(95‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک )ﺹ ‪(129‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ )ﺹ ‪(96‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﺹ ‪(14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪/‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ )ﺹ ‪(138‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ )ﺹ ‪(18‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ )ﺹ ‪8m30s :(129‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﮐﻞ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ 10‬
PAGE 151
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﮐﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‪ LCD‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺷﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﮑﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪) DC‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی( ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﻴﺲ ﭼﻼﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺣﻼﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ( ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻭﺯ ﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ]ﮐﻮﺩک‪]/[1‬ﮐﻮﺩک‪/[2‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ ﺳﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ‬ ‫• ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﮐﺞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺵ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪[.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SD‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SDHC‬ﺭﻭی ]‪ [LOCK‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(19‬‬ ‫]ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ[‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫]ﻓﻀﺎی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ[‪]/‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ[‬ ‫• ﻓﻀﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ )ﮐﭙﯽ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘُﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ[‪]/‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ[‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪(.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻧﻤﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫]ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﺪ[‬ ‫[ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫[ ﻳﺎ ]‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ] [‪] ،‬‬ ‫”‪ “10MB/s‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ”‪ “10MB/s‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﻫﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻳﮏ ﮐﭙﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﺹ ‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺹ ‪(168–160‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﻃﺮﻑ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺻﻔﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ )ﺹ ‪ (30‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(16‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]!‪ [¦/‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ )ﺹ ‪(22‬‬ ‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(128 ،49‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻣﻴﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻨﺰ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻫﻨﺠﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻴﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬ ‫)ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﻭی ]‪ [AUTO‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(98‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ]ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ[ ﺩﺭ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ]ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(107‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 163
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ[ )ﺹ ‪ (29‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ‪) AC‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی( ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪[.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻃﻮﻝ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ[ )ﺹ ‪ (130‬ﺭﻭی ]‪ [ON‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪]/‬ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﻭی ]([ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ )ﺹ ‪(46‬‬ ‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﺩ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺻﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 166
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ]‪ [COMPONENT OUT‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 167
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎً ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU/SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ[ ]‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(32‬‬ ‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ]~[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭗ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪ (109‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪ AF‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ )ﺹ ‪(59‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ 3‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﺘﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(138‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺻﻌﻮﺩی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫)‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 40‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 64‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 128‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 256‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 512‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫›‬ ‫(‬ ‫)‬ ‫›‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪320‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪130‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪110‬‬ ‫‪270‬‬ ‫‪420‬‬ ‫‪120‬‬ ‫‪220‬‬ ‫‪550‬‬ ‫‪860‬‬ ‫‪240‬‬ ‫‪440‬‬ ‫‪1
PAGE 171
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 40‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 64‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 128‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 256‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 512‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫)‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 64‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 128‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 256‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 512‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 32‬
PAGE 172
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک(‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 40‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ 27‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 17‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 56‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 64‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 37‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 39‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ 58‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 128‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 29‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ 18‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ 22‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ 00‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 256‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 59‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ 35‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ 40‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ 7
PAGE 173
‫• ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ SDHC‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ QuickTime‬ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ QuickTime‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﭘﻞ‬ ‫‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ‪ Microsoft‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻰ ﺷﺮﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.